Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EL1 SC4812T-MF 1X/1X-EVDO @ 800 Mhz CDMA BTS User Manual 1X SC4812T BTS Optimization ATP Release 2 16 3 x
Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T-MF 1X/1X-EVDO @ 800 Mhz CDMA BTS 1X SC4812T BTS Optimization ATP Release 2 16 3 x
Contents
- 1. Users Manual A
- 2. Users Manual B
- 3. Users Manual C
Users Manual B
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-21Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-1.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-22Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-2.png)
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-23Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-3.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-24Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-4.png)
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-25Command Line Interface OverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcan not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time. Due to architectural limitations, theGUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to usethe same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLIautomatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with a BTSinitiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI inthe same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running whenthe GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already runningwhen the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is alreadyrunning when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays thefollowing warning message:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application? Yes NoThis window also contains Yes and No buttons. Selecting Ye s starts theapplication. Selecting No terminates the application.CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command syntax is as follows:SverbSdevice including device identifier parametersSswitchSoption parameters consisting of:– keywords– equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values– parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLIcommands and their usage.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-5.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-26Logging into a BTSLogging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTSand the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at atime.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists.SThe LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting theWindows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restartthe computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance withTable 3-5 and Figure 3-3.CAUTION Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf/necf and cbsc–#.cdf file areused for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that areprovided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correctCDF/NECF files can result in invalid optimization. Failure touse the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.BTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using the GUIenvironment.Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if theLMF is not running).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on theCDMA icon.4Click on the desired BTS number. For explanation of BTS numbering, see Figure 3-4.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in theIP Address box.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-6.png)
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-27Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenActionStepNOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IPaddress for MGLI–2.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Click on Ping.– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If there is no response the following is displayed:128.0.0.2:9216:Timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.9Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normallyMPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.NOTEWhen performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment isconnected to the starter frame.10 Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.11 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS and frame numbers is displayed.)NOTESIf you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can beseen. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-7.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-28BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the CLIenvironment.NOTE If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the sametime, the GUI must be started first and BTS login must beperformed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 to start the GUIenvironment and log into a BTS.Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLIenvironment is not already running).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLIenvironment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the sameBTS, and Step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into forthis BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS)port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for thisBTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS)A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason” 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-8.png)
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-29Logging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLIoperating environments.NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to aBTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTSat the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environmentwill log out of it for both. When either a login or logout isperformed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that thelogin or logout has occurred.Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logoutpop–up message will appear).3Click on Yes or press the <Enter> key to confirm logout. The Logintab will appear.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI windowrunning at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–upmessage appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it canbe used for further operations.4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the systemcould not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is notlogged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the ConfirmLogout pop–up, and click OK in the Logout Error pop–up whichappears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of thedisplayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clickingon the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit from theFile menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message will appear. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-9.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-30Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same timeand further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2.1Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:24:51.028 Command Received and AcceptedCOMMAND=logout bts–3313:24:51.028 Command In Progress13:24:52.04 Command Successfully CompletedREASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the followingcommand:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before thewindow closes:Killing background processes.... 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-10.png)
![Using the LMF68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-31Establishing an MMI Communication SessionEquipment Connection – Figure 3-8 illustrates common equipmentconnections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations onFRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures whichrequire the MMI communication session.Initiate MMI Communication – For those procedures which requireMMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow theprocedures in Table 3-10 to initiate the communication session.Table 3-10: Establishing MMI CommunicationsStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires theMMI communication session.2If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMFfrom COM1 by performing the following:2a – Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.2b – In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.3Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from theWindows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>4Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer <Enter> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-11.png)
![Using the LMF 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-32Figure 3-8: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINLMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW00687Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help inthe window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–downmenu.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-12.png)
![Pinging the Processors68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-33Pinging the ProcessorsPinging the BTSFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. Figure 3-9 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts one link (of two identical links),A and B.Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN networkmodules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect DiagramCHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩINLMF CONNECTORBC–CCPCAGEABINABAOUTOUTBTS(EXPANSION)BC–CCPCAGEABINABAOUTBTS(STARTER)INOUTFW00141Follow the procedure in Table 3-11 and refer to Figure 3-9 as required toping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and verify LANredundancy is operating correctly.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-13.png)
![Pinging the Processors 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-34NOTE IMPORTANT: The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must beinstalled on each frame/enclosure before performing this test. Allother processor board LAN connections are made via thebackplanes.Table 3-11: Pinging the ProcessorsnStep Action1If you have not already done so, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-5 on page 3-17).2From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.3In the Open box, type ping and the <MGLI IP address> (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IPaddress for MGLI–2.4Click on the OK button.5If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-14.png)
![Download the BTS68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-35Download the BTSOverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture or factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSCusing the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) codeand data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user beforethe BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the devicedoes not match the release level of the site operating software AND theCBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download.If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located inAppendix G.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.ROM code must be manually selected for download.NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROMcode loaded at the factory.ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. A compatible revision–level RAM code mustthen be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM andRAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software releasebeing used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMARelease Notes (supplied on the tape or CD–ROM containing the BSSsoftware).RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAMcode file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM codecan be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is thedownload code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameterof the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have thecorrect hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS-RAM (yellow).3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-15.png)
![Download the BTS 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-36When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automaticallyalso downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, theMGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI willnot be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through theLMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM(yellow).The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)SRedundant GLI (GLI2 or GLI3)SClock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision codemust be loaded)SMulti Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X)STest Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) – if RFDS is installedNOTE The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and data,and put INS before downloading any other device. Thedownload code process for an MGLI automatically downloadsdata and enables the MGLI before downloading other devices.The other devices can be downloaded in any order.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-16.png)
![Download the BTS68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-37Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is notcompatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.PrerequisiteIdentify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release beingused on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCtCDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containingthe BSS software).Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into theBTS ( refer to Table 3-6).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Statusfrom the BTS menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROMVer column for each GLI.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the softwarerelease being used on the BSS, perform the following:4a – Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, asapplicable.4b – Disconnect the LMF computer.4c – Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.4d – Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTSdevices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release beingused, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 andproceed to downloading RAM code and data. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-17.png)
![Download the BTS 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-38Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLIFollow the procedure in Table 3-13 to download the firmwareapplication code for the MGLI. The download code action downloadsdata and also enables the MGLI.PrerequisiteSPrior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each ofthe devices to be loaded.SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5), andis logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-6).Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLInStep Action1Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code anddata downloads by performing the following steps:1a – Click on Tools in the LMF menu bar, and select UpdateNextLoad > CDMA from the pull–down menus.1b – Click on the BTS to be loaded.–– The BTS will be highlighted.1c – Click the button next to the correct code version for the softwarerelease being used.–– A black dot will appear in the button circle.1d – Click Save.1e – Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.2Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.3 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >Code/Data in the pull–down menus.– A status report is displayed confirmimg change in the device(s)status.4 Click OK to close the status window.– The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data andenabled.5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIsby clicking on the devices and repeating Steps 3 and 4.6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-18.png)
![Download the BTS68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-39Download Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesDownloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all equipped devices can be downloaded with one action.NOTE – When downloading multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). Thesedevices can be downloaded separately after completing themultiple download.– CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newersoftware version.Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data tonon–GLI devices.Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesnStep Action1Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking onthem.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >Code/Data in the pull–down menus.– A status report displays the result of the download for eachselected device.3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading iscompleted.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with codeand has changed to OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidlyflashing GREEN.NOTEThe command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can bedownloaded without doing a code download anytime a device isOOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.4To download just the firmware application data to each device, selectthe target device and select: Device>Download>DataBBX Cards Remain OOS_ROMIf BBX cards remain OOS_ROM (blue) after power–up or followingcode load, refer to Table 6-4, steps 9 and 10.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-19.png)
![Download the BTS 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-40Select CSM Clock SourceCSMs must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in thefollowing two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. Foradditional information on the CSM sub–system, see “ClockSynchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description” in the CSMSystem Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter.Select CSM Clock SourceA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source for each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options:SLocal GPSSMate GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)SHSO ExtenderSHSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)SLFR (only for sources 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green)SCSM is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock SourcenStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s) for which the clock source is to beselected.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSM/MAWI >Select Clock Source... in the pull–down menu list.– A CSM clock reference source selection window will appear.3Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Sourcepick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock ReferenceSources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item to beused.4Click on the OK button.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation.5Click on the OK button to close the status report window. NOTE For non–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured with theGPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in the CSM–1 slotbefore continuing.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-20.png)
![Download the BTS68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-41Enable CSMsNOTE – CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retainedin EEPROM. The download code procedure is required inthe event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs withupdated software versions. Use the status function todetermine the current code load versions.– The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloadedwith code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver(mounted on CSM–1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizesthe entire cellular system. CSM–2 provides redundancy but does nothave a GPS receiver.The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C LFR, HSO10 MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which theCSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSMmonitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs.Table 3-16: Enable CSMsnStep Action1Click on the target CSM (CSM–2 first, if equipped with two CSMs).2From the Device pull down, select Enable.– A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.– Click OK to close the status report window.NOTE– The board in slot CSM 1 interfaces with the GPS receiver. The enable sequence for this board cantake up to one hour (see below).– FAIL may be shown in the status report table for a slot CSM 1 enable action. If Waiting For PhaseLock is shown in the Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock isachieved.* IMPORTANT– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained andoperated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alterssatellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INScontains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.– If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for theGPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D positionfix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPSreceiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-21.png)
![Download the BTS 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-42Table 3-16: Enable CSMsnActionStepNOTE– If equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should bedark green (INS–STY)– After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).3If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-11 and Table 3-20 todetermine the cause. Enable MCCsFollow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs.NOTE The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled(IN–SERVICE ACTIVE) before downloading and enabling theMCC.Table 3-17: Enable MCCsnStep Action1Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pull–down menuchoose MCCs.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in thepull–down menu list.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enableoperation.3Click on OK to close the status report window. Enable Redundant GLIsFollow the procedure in Table 3-18 to enable the redundant GLI(s).Table 3-18: Enable Redundant GLIsnStep Action1Select the target redundant GLI(s).2From the Device menu, select Enable.– A status report window confirms the change in the device(s)status and the enabled GLI(s) is green.3Click on OK to close the status report window.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-22.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-43CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO VerificationCSM & LFR BackgroundThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM inslot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. TheCSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remoteGPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna headthat has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughtercard as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock DistributionCards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608MHz clocks. CCD–1 is married to CSM–1 and CCD–2 is married toCSM 2. A failure on CSM–1 or CCD–1 cause the system to switch toredundant CSM–2 and CCD–2.In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase LockedLoop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated byeither an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLLcircuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primaryand redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primaryand redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back–up source,provides excellent reliability and performance.Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewavereference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,LORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources).The 3 MHz signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1Bconnectors on the top interconnect panel for distribution to co–locatedframes at the site.Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure on CSM–1. During normal operation, the CSM–1board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-20). The sourceselection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.Front Panel LEDsThe status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR(STBY).SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attemptingto lock on GPS signal.SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. TroubleNotifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-23.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-44Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)The CSM and the LFR/HSO – The CSM performs the overallconfiguration and status monitoring functions for the LFR/HSO. In theevent of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is capable of maintainingsynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal.LFR – The LFR requires an active external antenna to receiveLORAN–C RF signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal,which is synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPStime. The LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPSlock.HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since theHSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lockUpgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXLFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logicalframes require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame hasan LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frameand interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR andLFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-19).HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection(see Table 3-19).NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM boardwarm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillatorfrequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-upallows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequencybefore any measurements are made.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-24.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-45CSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSMboards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of thisprocedure will be repeated for final verification after the overalloptimization has been completed.Null Modem CableA null modem cable is required. It is connected between the MMI portof the primary CSM and the null modem board. Figure 3-10 shows thewiring detail for the null modem cable.Figure 3-10: Null Modem Cable Detail53278146GNDRXTXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRDSRGNDTXRXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRDSRON BOTH CONNECTORSSHORT PINS 7, 8;SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 69–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE52378146FW00362PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-25.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-46Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment whilereferring to Figure 3-11 as required.Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1Perform one of the following operations:SFor local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSMslot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.SFor Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 isINS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemboard) to the MMI port on CSM–1.3Reinstall CSM–2.4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-3)NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.5When the terminal screen appears, press the <Enter> key until the CSM> prompt appears. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-26.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-47Figure 3-11: CSM MMI terminal connectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSM board shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = Fault3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-27.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-48GPS Initialization/VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify proper GPSreceiver operation.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board (see Figure 3-11).SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.CAUTION Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if theGPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RFconnector.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-28.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-49Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus– Observe the following typical response:Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and theGPS receivers.sources– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* NoNOTE“Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or “Faulty”should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the HSO asa back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a validsource by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-29.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-50Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action4If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage5Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.6Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus– Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-30.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-51Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).8If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.9Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 10)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-31.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-52Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action10 Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317511 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.12 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp LFR Initialization/VerificationThe LORAN–C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with theCSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overallconfiguration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:SAutomatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a seconddifferential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)SA 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSMIf the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-21to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source forthe GPS.NOTE If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped withan LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped with anHSO.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-32.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-53Table 3-21: LFR Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:mode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:This shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.– Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.– Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 1. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-33.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-54Table 3-21: LFR Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction4LORAN–C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the Hyperterminal window. HSO Initialization/VerificationThe HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillatorinterfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSMhandles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of theHSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintainingsynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for alimited time.The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not coveredby the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitrySGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHzTTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-34.png)
![CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-55PrerequisitesSThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15minutes.If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-22to configure the HSO.Table 3-22: HSO Initialization/VerificationStep Action1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.NOTEThe LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSMmust be locked to GPS.2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx –69532 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 0When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>Check for Good in the Status field.4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. TheHSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-35.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-56Test Equipment Set-upConnecting Test Equipment to the BTSThe following equipment is required to perform optimization:SLMFSTest setSDirectional coupler and attenuatorSRF cables and connectorsSNull modem cable (see Figure 3-10)SGPIB interface boxRefer to Table 3-23 and Table 3-24 for an overview of connections fortest equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see thefollowing figures:SFigure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.SFigure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show test set connections for IS–95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-21 shows test set connections for IS–95 A/B andCDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-23 and Figure 3-24 show typical TX and RX ATP setup witha directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).Test Equipment GPIB Address SettingsAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIBbus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must havea GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard addresssettings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment itemsare as follows:SSignal generator address: 1SPower meter address: 13SCommunications system analyzer: 18Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address of each piece of employed test equipment to match theapplicable addresses above.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-36.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-57Supported Test EquipmentCAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connectionsmust be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator asshown in the test setup illustrations.IS–95 A/B TestingOptimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B may be performed usingone of the following test sets:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSHewlett–Packard HP 8935SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterThe equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.CDMA2000 1X OperationOptimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers maybe performed using the following test equipment:SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal GeneratorSAgilent E4406A with E4432B Signal GeneratorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for1X FERThe E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should beconnected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 andR3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to theSerial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in bothIS–95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options areinstalled.SAgilent E7495A communications test setOptional test equipmentSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – can be used to perform cablecalibration.Test Equipment PreparationSee Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set andpower meter to perform calibration and ATP.Agilent E7495A communications test set requires additional setup andpreparation. This is described in detail in Appendix F.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-37.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-58Test Equipment Connection ChartsTo use the following charts to identify necessary test equipmentconnections, locate the communications system analyzer being used inthe COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read downthe column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of thetest cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the endconnection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriateequipment and/or BTS connector.IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment ConnectionsTable 3-23 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meetsMotorola standards and is supported by the LMF.Table 3-23: IS–95 A/B Test Equipment SetupCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALCyber–TestAdvant-estR3465HP8935HP8921AHP 8921W/PCSPowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF30 dB Direction-al Coupler & 20dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATIONEVENSECREFEVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEINEXTREF INCDMATIMEBASE INCDMATIMEBASE INCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIBSERIALPORTHP–IB HP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUTINPUT50–OHMRFIN/OUT TX1–6RFIN/OUTRFIN/OUT30 DB COUPLERAND 20 DB PADRX TESTCABLES RF GENOUTRF OUT50–OHM RX1–6DUPLEXOUTRF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORRFIN/OUT3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-38.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-59CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test EquipmentConnectionsTable 3-24 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X andIS–95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by theLMF.Table 3-24: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAgilent8935 (Op-tion 200 or R2K)AgilentE7495AAdvantestR3267AgilentE4406AAgilentE4432BSignalGeneratorAdvant-estR3562SignalGenera-torPowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF30 dBDirectionalCoupler &20 dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EXTTRIG INEXT TRIGTRIGGER IN19.6608 MHZCLOCKMOD TIMEBASE INEXT REFINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUSIEEE488 GPIB HP–IB GPIBSERIALPORTHP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT RF IN TX1–6RF INPUT50 OHM30 DB COUPLERAND 20 DB PADRX TESTCABLES RF OUT50 OHMRF OUT50–OHM RX1–6RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORPATTERNTRIG INGPIBRF OUTPUT50 OHMRF OUTPUT50–OHM10 MHZ IN10 MHZ OUT(SWITCHED) 10 MHZ IN10 MHZOUT10 MHZSERIALI/OSERIALI/OSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OEVENSECONDSYNC INEXT REFINHP–IBRF IN/OUTDUPLEXOUT *SYNTHEREF IN* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS–95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT CDMA2000 1X RX TESTING.EVENSECONDSYNC INPORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF IN3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-39.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-60Equipment Warm-upNOTE To assure BTS stability and contribute to optimization accuracyof the BTS, warm-up the BTS test equipment prior toperforming the BTS optimization procedure as follows:– Agilent E7495A for a minimum of 30 minutes– All other test sets for a minimum of 60 minutesTime spent running initial or normal power-up, hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up time.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TXOUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.– At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna(sector) assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to doso can result in serious personal injury and/or equipmentdamage.Automatic Cable Calibration Set–upFigure 3-12 through Figure 3-15 show the cable calibration setup forvarious supported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts thelocation of the input and output ports of each test set, and the right sidedetails the set up for each test.Manual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix F.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-40.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-61Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup – CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921AMotorola CyberTestAgilent 8935 Series E6380A(formerly HP 8935)Advantest Model R3465DUPLEXOUTRF OUTPUT50–OHMRF INPUT50–OHMRF GEN OUTANT INANTINSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The Directional Coupler is not used with theCybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connecteddirectly to the Cybertest Test Set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest TestSet. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEFW00089Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921ADIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTERDUPLEXOUTRF IN/OUT3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-41.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-62Figure 3-13: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLETESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEREF FW00089DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTERRF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)EXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)RFINPUT 50OHMRFOUTPUT50 OHMAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)SUPPORTED TEST SETS3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-42.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-63Figure 3-14: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup – Agilent 8935/E4432BTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPCALIBRATION SET UPTESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEN–N FEMALEADAPTERSUPPORTED TEST SETSAgilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 SeriesE6380A (Bottom)NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET.RF OUTPUT50 Ω100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETD. TX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONANTIN3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-43.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-64Figure 3-15: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E7495ATESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLECALIBRATION SET UP100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADD. RX and TX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATION10 DB PAD10 DB PADSHORTCABLE10 DB PAD10 DB PADTESTSETSUPPORTED TEST SETSAgilent E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF In3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-44.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-65Set-up for TX CalibrationFigure 3-16 through Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup – CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X), and Advantest R3465Motorola CyberTestAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANELRFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS2O DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSANTENNA PORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.Advantest Model R3465INPUT50–OHMGPIBCONNECTS TOBACK OF UNIT* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER73](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-45.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-66Figure 3-17: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS2O DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSANTENNA PORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)** A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERAgilent E4406AAdvantest Model R3267RF INRF INPUT50 Ω3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-46.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-67Figure 3-18: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E7495A (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDBTSCDMALMF10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXANTENNACONNECTORSYNCMONITORCSMTXANTENNACONNECTOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLENOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS, CONNECT THE TXTEST CABLE TO THEDUPLEXED ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERSENSOR2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)Agilent E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InINTERNALETHERNETCARDCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZERPOWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUT3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-47.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-68Setup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-19 and Figure 3-21 show test set connections for IS–95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-21 and Figure 3-22 show test setconnections for IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.Figure 3-19: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration – Agilent 8935TEST SET Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRS232 NULLMODEMCABLEBTSTXTESTCABLE10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSRFIN/OUTTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)EVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSM30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)CDMALMFREF FW00096Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-48.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-69Figure 3-20: Optimization/ATP Test Setup – HP 8921RF OUTONLYHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)EVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMRFIN/OUTREF FW00097GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRFIN/OUTRF OUTONLYHP PCS INTERFACE(FOR 1700 AND 1900 MHZ ONLY)3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-49.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-70Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Advantest R3267/3562, Agilent E4432B/E4406ATOBASEBANDGEN. REF. INON REAR OFSIGNALGENERATORTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANACOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.EVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00758RFINPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TOTRIGGER INON REAROF TRANS-MITTERTESTERTO PATTERNTRIG IN ONREAR OFSIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF INON REAR OF TRANS-MITTERTESTERRF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”SYNTHEREF INTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERSIGNAL GENERATORRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRXTESTCABLE100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERTXTESTCABLEBNC“T”19.6608MHZCLOCKEXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)10 MHZREF OUTNOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER.10MHZIN10MHZOUTNOTE:FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTEDBETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNAL GENERATOR10MHZOUT10MHZINBASEBANDGEN. REF. INBNC“T”3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-50.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-71Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Agilent E7495ATEST SET ATP TEST SET UPINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)BTSCDMALMF10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAINTERNALETHERNETCARDRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 ΩSYNCMONITORCSMCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERMTX TESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS, CONNECT THE TXTEST CABLE TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA CONNECTOR.2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBRX TESTRX TESTRXANTENNACONNECTORTXANTENNACONNECTORTESTCABLESNOTE: USE THE SAMECABLE SET FOR TX AND RXATP. SWITCH THE CABLESDURING ALL ATP TESTS ASSHOWN.POWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUTAgilent E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF In3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-51.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-72ATP Setup with Directional CouplersFigure 3-23 shows a typical TX ATP setup.Figure 3-23: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADOUTPUTPORTRVS (REFLECTED)PORT 50–OHMTERMINATIONFWD(INCIDENT)PORTBTS INPUTPORT TX TESTCABLEConnect TX test cable betweenthe directional coupler input portand the appropriate TX antennadirectional coupler connector.TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS Detail123RF FEED LINE TODIRECTIONALCOUPLERREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETINAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-23 andTable 3-24.TXTESTCABLETX RF FROM BTS FRAMETESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLERNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND COMPANION FRAMES. FW00116REF3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-52.png)
![Test Equipment Set-up68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-73Figure 3-24: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional CouplerFigure 3-24 shows a typical RX ATP setup.RX RF FROM BTSFRAME341256Connect RX test cable betweenthe test set and the appropriateRX antenna directional coupler.RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRF FEED LINE TOTX ANTENNAREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETRFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS DetailOUTAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-23 andTable 3-24.RX TestCableNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.FW001153](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-53.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-74Test Set CalibrationBackgroundProper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment andassociated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and thatmeasurements are correct.NOTE If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test the BTShas been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure doesnot need to be performed.This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables andadapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter thatmakes up the calibrated test equipment set has been replaced, theset must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can introducemeasurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements anddegradation to system performance. Motorola recommendsrepeating cable calibration before testing at each BTS site.NOTE Calibration of the communications system analyzer (orequivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the testequipment after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize fora minimum of 60 minutes.Calibration Procedures IncludedAutomaticProcedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibrationroutine to determine path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a testmeasurement offset file on the LMF computer.ManualAgilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not supportthe power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If thisinstrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibrationis attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, theLMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroingpower is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using theinstrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performingBay Level Offset calibration.Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to beperformed prior to automated calibration are included in the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-54.png)
![Test Set Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-75Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers areprovided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, ifneeded.GPIB AddressesGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept anyaddress in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Optionswindow GPIB address box must match the addresses of the testequipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. Toverify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the testequipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.IP AddressesFor the Agilent E7495A Communications Test Set, set the IP addressand complete initial setup as described in Appendix F (Specifically, seeTable F-1 on page F-3).Selecting Test EquipmentSerial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in theLMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items areconnected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normalsetup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment isto be connected remotely via a network connection or the AgilentE7495A Communications Test Set is used. Refer to Appendix F(Specifically, see Table F-1 on page F-3).PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SGPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correctusing the applicable procedures in Appendix F. (GPIB not applicablewith Agilent E7495A)SLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box. (GPIB not applicable with Agilent E7495A)Selecting Test EquipmentTest equipment may be selected either manually with operator input orautomatically using the LMF autodetect feature.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-55.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-76Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow theprocedure in Table 3-25 to select test equipment manually.Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabnStep Action1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu. TheLMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIBaddresses). Motorola–recommended addresses are:1 = signal generator13 = power meter18 = communications system analyzer* IMPORTANTWhen test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using apower meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzerfor RF power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox notchecked).7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)NOTEWith manual selection, the LMF does not attempt to detect the test equipment to verify it isconnected and communicating with the LMF.To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix F.8Click on Dismiss to close the LMF Options window. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-56.png)
![Test Set Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-77Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in Serial Connection TabWhen using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMFexamines which test equipment items are actually communicating withthe LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to use the auto-detectionfeature.Table 3-26: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectnStep Action1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu. TheLMF Options window appears.2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the Auto–Detection button.5If they are not already displayed in the box labeled GPIB address to search, click in the box andtype in the GPIB addresses for the test equipment to be used, separating each address withcommas and no spaces. (Refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F forinstructions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses.)NOTEDuring the GPIB address search for a test equipment item to perform RF power measurements(that is, for TX calibration), the LMF will select the first item it finds with the capability toperform the measurement. If, for example, the address sequence 13,18,1 is included in the GPIBaddresses to search box, the power meter (GPIB address 13) will be used for RF powermeasurements. If the address sequence 18,13,1 is included, the LMF will use the communicationssystem analyzer (GPIB address 18) for power measurements.6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark willappear in the applicable Manual Configuration section check boxes for detected test equipmentitems.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window. Detecting Test Equipment when using Agilent E7495ACheck that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. AgilentE7495A equipment must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Thenperform the procedures described in Appendix F (Specifically, seeTable F-1 on page F-3, Table F-2, and Table F-3 on page F-4).3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-57.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-78Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the powermeter is zeroed.NOTE The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support powermeasurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment Calibrationsection of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.PrerequisitesSLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for teststhat are to be run.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-25 orTable 3-26)Calibrating test equipmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-27: Test Equipment CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipmentfrom the pull–down menu. A Directions window isdisplayed.2Follow the directions provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window andstart the calibration process. A status report window isdisplayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-58.png)
![Test Set Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-79Calibrating Cables OverviewThe LMF Cable Calibration function is used to measure the path loss (indB) for the TX and RX cables, adapters, directional couplers, andattenuators that make up the cable configurations used for testing. Acommunications system analyzer is used to measure the loss of both theTX test cable and the RX test cable configurations. LMF cablecalibration consists of the following processes:Measure the loss of a short cableThis is done to compensate for any measurement error of thecommunications system analyzer. The short cable, which is used only forthe calibration process, is connected in series with both the TX and RXtest cable configurations when they are measured.The measured loss of the TX and RX test cable configurations minus themeasured loss of the short cable equals the actual loss of theconfigurations. This is done so that any error in the analyzermeasurement is eliminated from both the TX and RX measurements.Measure the loss of the short cable plus the RX testcable configurationThe RX test cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cablewith type–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RXconnector to the test equipment.When the BTS antenna connectors carry duplexed TX and RX signals, adirectional coupler is required and an additional attenuator may also berequired (for certain BTS types) for the RX test cable configuration.These additional items must be included in the path loss measurement.Measure the loss of the short cable plus the TX testcable configurationThe TX test cable configuration normally consists of two coax cableswith type–N connectors, a directional coupler, a termination load withsufficient rating to dissipate the BTS output power, and an additionalattenuator, if required by the BTS type. The total path loss of the TX testconfiguration must be as required for the BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB).The Motorola Cybertest analyzer differs from other communicationssystem analyzers because the required attenuation/load is built into thetest set. Because of this, the Cybertest TX test configuration consistsonly of the required length coax cable.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-59.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-80Calibrate Test Cabling using Communications System AnalyzerCable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.Appendix F covers the procedures for manual cable calibration.NOTE LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished using an HP8921analyzer for 1.7/1.9 GHz. A different analyzer type or the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method (Table 3-29 andFigure 3-25) must be used. Cable calibration values must bemanually entered into the LMF cable loss file if the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method is used. To use theHP8921A for manual test cable configuration calibration for 800MHz BTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section ofAppendix F.PrerequisitesSTest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes. Agilent E7495A requires only 30 minute warmup.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-25 orTable 3-26).STest equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for thetype of test cable configuration to be calibrated.Calibrating cablesRefer to Figure 3-12, Figure 3-13, or Figure 3-14 and follow theprocedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the test cable configurations.Table 3-28: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System AnalyzernStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select CableCalibration... in the pull–down menu. A CableCalibration window is displayed.2Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels boxNOTEMultiple channels numbers must be separated with acomma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or morechannels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated foreach channel. Interpolation is accomplished for otherchannels as required for TX calibration.3 Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RXCable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick list.4 Click OK, and follow the directions displayed for eachstep. A status report window will be displayed with theresults of the cable calibration. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-60.png)
![Test Set Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-81Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate the TX/Duplexed RXcables using a signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer toFigure 3-25, if required. Follow the procedure in Table 3-30 to calibratethe Non–Duplexed RX cables using the signal generator and spectrumanalyzer. Refer to Figure 3-26, if required.Table 3-29: Calibrating TX/Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 3-25, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:869–894 MHz for North American Cellular or 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-25, A) & record the value.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of thediagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:869–894 MHz for North American Cellular or 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCSRecord the value at point B.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example: Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as is to ensure testprocedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-25: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWERSENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THEPCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLETHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TOTHE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVELOFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THEPCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.AONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATORFW002933](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-61.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-82Table 3-30: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Cables Using a Signal Generator &Spectrum AnalyzerStep ActionNOTEWhen preparing to calibrate a BTS with Duplexed TX and RX the RX cable calibration must be doneusing calibration setup in Figure 3-25 and the procedure in Table 3-29.1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 3-26, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:824–849 for North American Cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-26, A) and record the value.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram (see Figure 3-26, B) to measurethe output at the customer’s RX frequency of:824–849 for North American Cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCSRecord the value at point B.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example: Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as is to ensure testprocedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-26: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerSpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE HP PCSINTERFACE OUTPUT PORTDURING RX MEASUREMENTS.SignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGCABLE 2CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-62.png)
![Test Set Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-83Setting Cable Loss ValuesCable loss values for TX and RX test cable configurations are normallyset by accomplishing automatic cable calibration using the LMF and theapplicable test equipment. The LMF stores the measured loss values inthe cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set or changedmanually. Follow the procedure in Table 3-31 to set cable loss values.CAUTION If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF, cableloss values must be manually entered in the LMF database.Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration andreduced site performance.PrerequisitesSLMF is logged into the BTSTable 3-31: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Cable Loss in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Cable Loss tab or the RX Cable Loss tab, as required.3To add a new channel number, perform the following:3a – Click on the Add Row button.3b – Click in the Channel # or Loss (dBm) column, as required.3c – Enter the desired value.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-63.png)
![Test Set Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-84Setting TX Coupler Loss ValuesIf an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TXcalibration and audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow theprocedure in Table 3-32 to set coupler loss values.PrerequisitesSLMF is logged into the BTSSPath loss, in dB, of the TX coupler must be knownSetting loss valuesTable 3-32: Setting TX Coupler Loss ValueStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > CouplerLoss... in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Coupler Loss tab or the RX Coupler Losstab, as required3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has acoupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changedand change the value.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to savedisplayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button is used willbe lost when the window is dismissed.SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools >Options > BTS Options tab must be checked beforeentered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TXcalibration and audit functions.SNew or changed values will be used by the LMF as soon asthey are saved. Logging out and logging in again are notrequired to cause saved changes to take effect. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-64.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-85Bay Level Offset CalibrationIntroductionBay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of theoptimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normalequipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correcttransmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet siteperformance requirements.RF Path Bay Level Offset CalibrationCalibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibrationtable in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port andterminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBXbackplane slot, travels through the Power Amplifier (PA) and terminatesat a BTS TX antenna port.For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of thecell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansioncable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,travels though the PA and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of thesame expansion frame.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Eachtransmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travelsthrough the PA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX pathcalibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to thedefault value.At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless ofphysical BBX board installation in the slot.When to Calibrate BLOsCalibration of BLOs is required:SAfter initial BTS installationSOnce each yearSAfter replacing any of the following components or associatedinterconnecting RF cabling:– BBX board– C–CCP shelf– CIO card– CIO to Power Amplifier backplane RF cable– PA backplane–PA– TX filter / TX filter combiner– TX thru-port cable to the top of frame3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-65.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-86TX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector you must first verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector assigned tothe LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is ahigh probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of eachCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBXboards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under testand install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currentlybeing tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that aredue for periodic optimization.– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correctBBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to includeBBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).BLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–n.cal calibration(BLO) offset data file in the bts–n folder. After calibration has beencompleted, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using theDownload BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you printout a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the followingdescriptions.The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (aslot Block).Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slotheader block contains:SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header andactual calibration data.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-66.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-87SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. Thearray is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch thecontained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, mainreceive and diversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array AssignmentsRange AssignmentC[1]–C[240] TransmitC[241]–C[480] Main ReceiveC[481]–C[720] Diversity ReceiveNOTE Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurationssupported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX Sectorization TX RX RX DiversitySlot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)1 (Omni) 3–Sector,C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1stCiC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]36 Sector,1stCarrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]41stCarrier 3–Sector,C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]5Carrier3–Sector,3rdCiC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]73–Sector,C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]83–Sector,2ndCiC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]96 Sector,2ndCarrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]102ndCarrier 3–Sector,C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]11Carrier3–Sector,4thCiC[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720] . . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-67.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-88Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX RX DiversityRXTXSectorizationSlot[20] (Redundant BBX–13)1 (Omni) 3–Sector,C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1stCiC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]36 Sector,1stCarrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]41stCarrier 3–Sector,C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]5Carrier3–Sector,3rdCiC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600] . . . continued on next page73–Sector,C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]83–Sector,2ndCiC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]96 Sector,2ndCarrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]102ndCarrier 3–Sector,C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]11Carrier3–Sector,4thCiC[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Twoentries are required for each calibration point.SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all evenentries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated isrepeated to fill out the 10 points.Example:C[1]=384, odd cal entry= 1 ‘‘calibration point”C[2]=19102, even cal entryC[3]=777,C[4]=19086,..C[19]=777,C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this would be repeated for the next 8 points)SWhen the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for theBBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the calfile. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibrationpoints are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibrationpoints (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for eachset.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-68.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-89Test Equipment Set-up for RF Path CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table 3-35 to set up test equipment.Table 3-35: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path CalibrationStep Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 (on page 3-17) to interface the LMFcomputer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 (on page 3-26) to start a GUI LMF session.3If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-27 (on page 3-78).NOTEVerify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.4For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, orFigure 3-19, depending on the communications analyzer being used.Transmit (TX) Path Calibration DescriptionThe assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the topof the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelListCDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwrCDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (locatedunder the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF fileparameter).NOTE If both the BTS–x.cdf and CBSC–x.cdf files are current, allinformation will be correct on the LMF. If not, the carrier andchannel will have to be set for each test.The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dBof the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than+1.5 dB.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupleroption, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately 42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output powermeasured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Outputminus BBX output level.SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-69.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-90TX Calibration and the LMFThe LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). TheAll Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TXcalibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and performTX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TXcalibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TXaudit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA TestParameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features whichare described in the following subsections.Rate Set Drop-down Pick ListThe Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card isselected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for thetest. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.Verify BLOIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using theUtil>Edit>TX Coupler Loss... function.Single-Sided BLO CheckboxAnother option that appears in the pull–down menu is Single–sidedBLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus–or–minus someoffset. The ranges that we currently use for calibration are wider thannecessary to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of thatrange is where non–redundant BBXs should be. When Single–sidedBLO is selected, the result is only considered a success if it is in thelower half of the range. If it was normally a success from 37–47 (whichis 42 "5), Single–sided BLO would make it a success only if the resultwas from 37–42. To get the more stringent conditions, the operatorchecks Single–sided BLO when calibrating non–redundant transceivers.Single–sided BLO carries the likelihood of more failures. This optionshould only be used by experienced CFEs.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-70.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-91Test Pattern Drop-down Pick ListThe Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Patternpull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:SPilot (default) – performs tests using a pilot signal only. This patternshould be used when running in–service tests. It only requires a BBXto do the test.SStandard – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and sixtraffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non–in–servicetests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gainvalues specified by the IS97 standard.SCDFPilot –performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gainis specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot togenerate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGainparameter in the CDF file instead of a pre–determined value.SCDF – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six trafficchannels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified inthe CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standardpattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings forthe following CDF parameters are used:– PilotGain– PchGain– SchGain– NomGain1WaySet-up for TX CalibrationThe workaround in Table 3-36 allows the user to manually set the BLOlimits to ensure that the redundant BBX BLO test does not fail due to thepreset offset being incorrectly set for the frame under test. A future LMFrelease will correct this problem.Table 3-36: Initial Set-up for TX CalibrationnStep Action1Delete the existing calibration file (if any) from the BTS folder on LMFlaptop from the location C:\wlmf\cdma\bts–#, where # is the BTSnumber.2To edit the nominal TX BLO, from the Util menu, select Edit > TXNominal Offset. In the TX Cal Parameter window, make any necessarychanges to ensure the Tx BLO Nominal Offset (in dB) is correct:– For 800 MHz, the value is 45.0 (dB), OR– For 1900 MHz, the value is 43.0 (dB).3Download the data, which includes BLO values, to all the BBXs. From theDevice menu, select Download > Data 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-71.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-92TX CalibrationWARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handlingany circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a highprobability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedureThe LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentiallyidentical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired(Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-37).PrerequisitesBefore running this procedure, be sure that the following have beendone:SThe card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct codeand data loads.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).SIf running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXcalibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards movedsince they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.All Cal Audit/TX Path Calibration procedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the All Cal/Audit and TXpath calibration test.Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedurenStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following theprocedure in Table 3-35.2Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-72.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-93Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedurenActionStep4For All Cal Audit...– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–downmenus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.For TX Calibration– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–downmenus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channelsbox.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8 If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).9If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.* IMPORTANTSingle–Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box whencalibrating the redundant BBX.10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section– see page 3-91).11 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.12 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process iscompleted, results will be displayed in the status report window.13 Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-73.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-94Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from theCAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded tothe selected BBX devices.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).STX calibration is successfully completed.Follow the steps in Table 3-38 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.Table 3-38: Download BLOnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download> BLO from the pull–down menus. A status reportwindow displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO isdownloaded.3Click on OK to close the status report window.Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration auditprocedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path atthe site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine thesuccess or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up isused.NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data downloadto BBXs must have been successfully completed prior toperforming the calibration audit.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-74.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-95TX Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slotsper the procedure in Table 3-39WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.TX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM–1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-75.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-96TX Path Audit procedureAfter a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO datain the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-39 toperform a BTS TX path audit.Table 3-39: BTS TX Path AuditnStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedurein Table 3-35 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).2Select the BBX(s) to be audited.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).4 Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX>TX Audit... from the pull–down menus. ACDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEThe correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 2, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.NOTESingle–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.9In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern from the drop–down list (refer to “Test PatternDrop–down Pick List” – see page 3-91).10 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process iscompleted, results will be displayed in the status report window.12 Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the Status Report window and provides information in theDescription field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run thetest. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer toChapter 6, Troubleshooting.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-76.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-97All Cal/Audit TestThe Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibrationand Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through theappropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.NOTE If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO data isautomatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portionof the test is run.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM–1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code and data loads.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Follow the procedure in Table 3-40 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.Table 3-40: All Cal/Audit TestnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.NOTEIf STANDARD, CDFPilot, or CDF is selected for the TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCCmust be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5If at least one MCC was selected in Step1 select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.6 Select Verify BLO or Single–sided BLO.NOTESingle–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.7In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern from the drop–down list (refer to “Test PatternDrop–down Pick List” – see page 3-91).8Click on OK.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-77.png)
![Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-98Table 3-40: All Cal/Audit TestnActionStep9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. A status report window displays thetest results.10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Create CAL FileThe Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so itcan be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL fileexists. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.WARNING The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this action cancause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. Tomanually edit the CAL file, you must first logout of the BTS. Ifyou manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal Filefunction, the edited information is lost.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SLMF is logged into the BTS.SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.Creating a CAL FileTable 3-41: Create CAL FilenStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs.NOTEThe CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item. A status reportwindow displays the results of the action.4 Click OK to close the status report window. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-78.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-99RFDS Set–up and CalibrationRFDS DescriptionNOTE The RFDS is not available for the –48 V BTS at the time of thispublication.The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or froman LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMACDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDSUser’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation.RFDS Parameter SettingsThe bts–#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match theinstalled RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editableparameters and their defaults. Table 3-42 explains how to edit theparameter settings.SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (9600 system RFDS only)SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)NOTE Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file to verify,view, or modify data. Because the bts–#.cdf file is generated ona Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoftWordPad, will display file content in a more easily–read formatthan many simple text editors.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-79.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-100Checking and Setting RFDS ParametersFollow the procedure in Table 3-42 to review and/or edit RFDSparameters.Table 3-42: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action1Important! Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.2Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file:EXAMPLE:Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)Mc1Equip = 0Mc2Equip = 0Mc3Equip = 0Mc4Equip = 0RfdsEquip = 2TestOrigDN = ’123456789’TsuEquip = 1NOTEThe above is an example of entries extracted from the bts–#.cdf file that should have been generatedby the OMC–R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if theRFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.3Save changes and/or quit the editor.4Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session (refer to Table 3-6).5 If no changes were made to the bts–#.cdf file fields listed in Step 2, proceed to Step 6. If changes weremade, continue with Step 8.NOTETo make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.6When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts–#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to theMGLI by performing the following:6a – To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundantGLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelfslot.6b – Click on the MGLI.6c – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull–down menu. A statusreport window shows the status of the operation.6d – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.6e – Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).6f – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull–down menus(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window showsthe status of the download.6g – Click OK to close the status report window.6h – Click on the MGLI.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-80.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-101Table 3-42: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action6i – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down menu. A statusreport window shows the status of the operation.6j – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.j! CAUTIONWhen the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. Duringthis process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2–3 minutes.DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.6k – Re–seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejectortabs.6l – Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTSmenu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull–down menus.7Any MCCs that were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, downloaded withdata, and re–enabled as follows:7a – Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar andclicking on MCCs in the pull–down menu.7b – In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull–down menu. A statusreport window shows the status of the operation.7c – Click OK to close the status report window.7d – Repeat Step 7a to select the MCCs.7e – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select Download > Data from the pull–down menu.(Selected devices do not change colot when data is downoaded.)– A status report window shows the status of the download.7f – Click on OK to close the status report window.7g – When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-17.8Click on the RFDS tab.9Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:9a – Click on the SUA to select it.9b – Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull–down menu. A statusreport shows the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.9c – Click OK to close the status report window.NOTEIf the LMF displays an error message, check the following:SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify RFDS has power.SVerify RFDS status LED is green.SVerify entries in RFDS fields of the bts–#.cdf file are correct (refer to Step 2).SStatus the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the properstate (INS_ACT (bright green)). 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-81.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-102RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to beprogrammed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, orbe used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must beprogrammed with the appropriate system parameters and phone numberduring hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must berecorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstall of the RFDS.Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAMTable 3-43 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-43: Definition of ParametersAccess_Overload_CodeSlot_IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary_Channel_APrimary_Channel_BSecondary_Channel_ASecondary_Channel BThese parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.Lock_CodeSecurity_CodeService_LevelStation_Class_MarkDo not change.IMSI_11_12IMSI_MCCThese fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:OMC000>disp bts–# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN Phone Number This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN andMIN should be entered into the switch as well.NOTEThis field is different from the TODN field in the bts–#.cdf file. TheMIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN isthe number the subscriber calls.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-82.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-103Valid NAM RangesTable 3-44 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.Table 3-44: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess_Overload_Code 0 15Slot_Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary_Channel_A 25 1175Primary_Channel_B 25 1175Secondary_Channel_A 25 1175Secondary_Channel_B 25 1175Lock_Code 0 999Security_Code 0 999999Service_Level 0 7Station_Class_Mark 0 255IMSI_11_12 0 99IMSI_MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/A3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-83.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-104Set Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is notinstalled. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and isrequired if an RFDS is installed.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSFollow the procedure in Table 3-45 to set antenna map data for theRFDS.Table 3-45: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull–down menus. Atabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to selectthe antenna map to be edited.3Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the columnwhere entry or editing is needed.4Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–Antenna Map... section of LMF Help functionon–line documentation for antenna map examples.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-84.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-105Set RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered.PrerequisiteSLMF is logged into the BTSNOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to theantenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to set the RFDS Configuration Data.Table 3-46: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull–downmenus. A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configurationtab, as required.3To add a new antenna number, perform the following:3a – Click on the Add Row button.3b – Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.3c – Enter the desired data.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Helpfunction on–line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-85.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-106RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RXpaths.TX Path Calibration – For a TX antenna path calibration the BTSXCVR is keyed at a pre–determined power level and the BTS poweroutput level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measuredat the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring testequipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at theTX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibrationoffset value.RX Path Calibration – For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS iskeyed at a pre–determined power level and the power input level ismeasured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power levelmeasured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directionalcoupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)between the RFDS–keyed power level and power level measured at theBTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.RFDS calibration and the CAL file – The TX and RX RFDScalibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]Block.TSIC channel frequency – For each RFDS TSIC, the channelfrequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of theappropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-47.Table 3-47: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel FrequenciesSystem Channel Calibration Points800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 6821.9 GHz 408 and 791WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/orequipment damage.PrerequisitesSTest equipment has been selected.STest equipment and test cables have been calibrated.STX calibration has been performed and BLO data has beendownloaded to the BBXs.STest equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.SAntenna map data has been entered for the site.SBBXs are OOS–RAM.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-86.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-107RFDS Calibration ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-48 to perform RFDS calibration.Table 3-48: RFDS Calibration ProcedureStep Action1In the LMF, select the CDMA BTS–xxx tab.2If the BTS Control button is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTSmenu bar to select it.3Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration(refer to Table 1-6 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).4Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull–down menu. AnRFDS Calibration set–up window will be displayed.5In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required6Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-47) in the Channel Field box. To enter morethan one channel number, use the following methods:– Separate non–sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces; for example: 247,585,742.– Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the rangeseparated by a dash and no spaces; for example: 385–395.7If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.8Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrlkey while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s)).9Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the drop–down list if performing RXcalibration.10 Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-upwindow.11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.12 When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.13 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.14 Click on the Frame tab.15 Select the MGLI by clicking on it.16 Download updated RFDS offset data to the MGLI (see Step 6 in Table 3-42). 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-87.png)
![RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-108Program TSU NAMThe NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process testcalls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SMGLI is INS.STSU is powered up and has a code load.Program NAM ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-49 to program the TSU NAM.Table 3-49: Program the TSU NAMStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).3Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull–down menu. ANAM programming window will appear.4Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-43 and Table 3-44).5Click on the OK button to display the status report.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-88.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-109BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestingObjectiveThis section tests the redundancy options that could be included in thecell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modulesequipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partnerand resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently activeCSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMAreference signal.Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant optionsincluded in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basicpower supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in thefollowing tables should be bypassed.STable 3-52. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-53. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-54. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm TestsSTable 3-55. PA Redundancy TestSTable 3-56. MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestDuring redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the masterGLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.Test EquipmentThe following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:SLMFSCommunications Test SetRedundancy/Alarm TestPerform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and toconfirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. Theprocedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:SPower supply/converter modules in all framesSDistribution shelf modules in the BTS frameSC–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)SPA modules in the BTS frameSAMR Customer defined input/output tests3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-89.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-110Test Equipment SetupFollow the procedure in Table 3-50 to set up test equipment:NOTE All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1Table 3-50: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action1Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector onthe BTS frame (refer to Table 3-5, page 3-17).2Login to the BTS.3Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (seeFigure 3-16).NOTEIf site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI andBBX boards installed in any redundant slot positions at thistime.4Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.5Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via theAMR Alarm connector (A & B) by clicking on MGLI, thenselecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.NOTEDuring configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spuriousalarms may report. Allow the BTS to stabilize for 10 seconds.If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS hasstabilized, determine the cause before proceeding further.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-90.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-111Power Supply RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the power supplymodules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarmmonitor) are also verified.Table 3-51: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)Step Action1Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 2622Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.3Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.4Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-27).– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.– Verify no other modules went OOS.5Re-install PS–1.Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.NOTEFor +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.7On –48 V systems, remove PS–4 (see Figure 3-28).– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.– Verify no other modules went OOS.8Re-install PS–4.Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.9Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS–5 through PS–9.10 Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.11 Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-91.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-112Figure 3-27: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf19 mm Filler PanelPS–3AMR–1CSM–1CSM–238 mm Filler PanelAMR–2GLI2–1GLI2–2MCC–6BBX2–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–RSwitchMPC/EMPC–1MPC/EMPC–2CIOBBX–7BBX–8BBX–9BBX–10BBX–11BBX–12MCC–5MCC–4MCC–3MCC–2MCC–1MCC–12MCC–11MCC–10MCC–9MCC–8MCC–7PS–2PS–1CCD–2 CCD–1NOTE: MCCs may beMCC8Es, MCC24s, orMCC–1Xs. BBXs maybe BBX2s or BBX–1Xs.GLIs may be GLI2s orGLI3s.HSO/LFRFW00295Figure 3-28: –48 V BTS Power Conversion ShelfFW00501PS–6AMRPS–5PS–4PS–9PS–8PS–71C1A2A2C3C3A4A4CLPA1D1B2B2D3D3B4B4D3030303030303030FANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONT3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-92.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-113Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy TestsFollow the steps in Table 3-52 to verify alarms reported by the masterGLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failureoccurs.Table 3-52: Miscellaneous Alarm TestsStep Action1 Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.2Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:•Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-29 or Figure 3-30).•Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.NOTEFollow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.3Starter Frames Only: Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.•Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-27) one at a time.•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.4Expansion Frames Only: Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.•Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-27) one at a time•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.5If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.•Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-27).•Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.•Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarmmonitor).•Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.NOTEAll PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-93.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-114Figure 3-29: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan ModulesFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFAN MODULESLATCHESFW00130Figure 3-30: –48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan ModulesFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFAN MODULESLATCHESFW00489FAN MODULESLATCHESFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTBBX RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-53 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in theC–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via thealarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additionalsectors at the customer’s discretion.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-94.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-115Table 3-53: BBX Redundancy AlarmsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.3Remove the primary BBX.4Observe a carrier is still present.The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.5Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.6Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respectivefrequency.7Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.8 The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.9Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.10 Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at eachrespective frequency:11 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-95.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-116CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm TestsFollow the procedure in Table 3-54 to verify the manual redundancy ofthe CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported isalso covered.NOTE DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-54, unless the site isconfigured with a LORAN–C or HSO timebase as a backup forthe GPS.Table 3-54: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame.This forces the LORAN–C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.3Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.4Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.5Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.6Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.7 Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.SVarious CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.8Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.NOTEIt can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs goOOS_RAM.9Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.10 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-96.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-117Table 3-54: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action* IMPORTANTDO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.11 Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.SVarious CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.12 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.13 Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.SObserve PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.14 Disable the primary and redundant BBXs. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-97.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-118Power Amplifier (PA) Redundancy TestFollow the procedure in Table 3-55 to verify redundancy of the PowerAmplifiers (PA).WARNING First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFOREmoving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury and/or equipment damage.Table 3-55: Power Amplifier Redundancy TestStep Action1From the pulldown menu select:Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain> Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 2622Key-up the BBX assigned to the PAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).3Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrieramplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.NOTESee Figure 3-19 for test equipment setup, if required.4Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st PA of the pair.NOTEAfter power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for theremoval of the 1st PA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must becomplete before proceeding.5 Verify:•The other PA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the PA.•The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzerdisplay remains basically unchanged.•PA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.6Re-apply power to the PA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.NOTEAll PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.7Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd PA of the pair.8De-key the BBX.n WARNINGFirst verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do socan result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify PAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cableon top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-98.png)
![BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-119MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestCAUTION This test can only be performed when the MM path is establishedby the MM (not just with LAPD link connected). Attempting toforce the GLIs to “hot swap” under alarm monitor control, whenisolated from the MM, causes MGLIs to hang up.Table 3-56: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)Step ActionNOTESThis test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connectedand communication is established with the MM.SBOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.1Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.2Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.3Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.4Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.5Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.6Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.7Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-99.png)
![Alarms Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-120Alarms TestingAlarm VerificationALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs andOutputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors andoutput devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of activesensors as well controlling output devices.The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signalscoming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarmconnectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top ofthe frame (see Figure 3-31). The ALARM A connector is alwaysfunctional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equippedin the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitorsinput numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors inputnumbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-32). State transitions on these inputlines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs areavailable. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is setby the CBSC.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util>Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included:SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, andMajor) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level ofalarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desiredalarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (forindividual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) whileclicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pausebutton is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. Whenthe Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked andthe Continue button is clicked are not displayed.SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms thatoccur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-100.png)
![Alarms Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-121Figure 3-31: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numberingti-CDMA-WP-00041-v01-ildoc-ftw591602591602PurposeThe following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relaycontacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMRalarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Performthese procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reportedproperly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak systemperformance.Study the site engineering documents and perform the following testsonly after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required tointerconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relaysmeet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS InstallationManual.NOTE Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand thisprocedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform these tests:SLMFSAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optionalAbbreviations used in the following figures and tables aredefined as:SNC = normally closedSNO = normally openSCOM or C = commonSCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) OutputSCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) InputNOTE3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-101.png)
![Alarms Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-122Figure 3-32: AMR Connector Pin Numbering59 160 2ALARM A(AMR 1) ALARM B(AMR 2)Returns2526A CDI 18 . . . A CDI 159 160 2 Returns2526B CDI 36 . . . B CDI 19FW00302NOTE The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the AlarmsTest Box Procedure, Table 3-57. If not using an Alarm Test Box,follow the procedure listed in Table 3-58.CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test BoxTable 3-57 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification usingthe Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare resultswith the LMF display.NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The defaultdelay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box switches in the newposition until the alarms have been reported.Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-31).9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported foreach switch setting.10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reportedfor each switch setting.11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-102.png)
![Alarms Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-123Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting.15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.30 Select the MGLI.31 Click on the Device menu.32 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.33 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-103.png)
![Alarms Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-124Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test BoxTable 3-58 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verificationwithout the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructedand compare results with the LMF display.NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The defaultdelay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait for the alarmreport before removing the short.Table 3-58: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on OK to close the status report window.7Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.8Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.9Select the MGLI.10 Click on the Device menu.11 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.. . . continued on next page3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-104.png)
![Alarms Testing68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 3-125Table 3-58: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep Action12 Click on Normally Closed.A status report window displays the results of the action.13 Click on OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.14 Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.15 Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click on OK to close the status report window.21 Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.No alarms should be displayed.22 Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.No alarms should be displayed.23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. 3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-105.png)
![Alarms Testing 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP3-126Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsTable 3-59 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.Table 3-59: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsWire Signal NameWireSignal NamePinWire Color Alarm A Alarm B PinWireColor Alarm A Alarm B1Blu/Wht A CDO1 NC B CDO9 NC 31 Blu/Yel Cust Retn 4 B CDI 222Wht/Blu A CDO1 Com B CDO9 Com 32 Yel/Blu A CDI 4 Cust Retn 223Org/Wht A CDO1 NO B CDO9 NO 33 Org/Yel Cust Retn 5 B CDI 234Wht/Org A CDO2 NC B CDO10 NC 34 Yel/Org A CDI 5 Cust Retn 235Grn/Wht A CDO2 Com B CDO10 Com 35 Grn/Yel Cust Retn 6 B CDI 246Wht/Grn A CDO2 NO B CDO10 NO 36 Yel/Grn A CDI 6 Cust Retn 247Brn/Wht A CDO3 NC B CDO11 NC 37 Brn/Yel Cust Retn 7 B CDI 258Wht/Brn A CDO3 Com B CDO11 Com 38 Yel/Brn A CDI 7 Cust Retn 259Slt/Wht A CDO3 NO B CDO11 NO 39 Slt/Yel Cust Retn 8 B CDI 2610 Wht/Slt A CDO4 NC B CDO12 NC 40 Yel/Slt A CDI 8 Cust Retn 2611 Blu/Red A CDO4 Com B CDO12 Com 41 Blu/Vio Cust Retn 9 B CDI 2712 Red/Blu A CDO4 NO B CDO12 NO 42 Vio/Blu A CDI 9 Cust Retn 2713 Org/Red A CDO5 NC B CDO13 NC 43 Org/Vio Cust Retn 10 B CDI 2814 Red/Org A CDO5 Com B CDO13 Com 44 Vio/Blu A CDI 10 Cust Retn 2815 Grn/Red A CDO5 NO B CDO13 NO 45 Grn/Vio Cust Retn 11 B CDI 2916 Red/Grn A CDO6 NC B CDO14 NC 46 Vio/Grn A CDI 11 Cust Retn 2917 Brn/Red A CDO6 Com B CDO14 Com 47 Brn/Vio Cust Retn 12 B CDI 3018 Red/Brn A CDO6 NO B CDO14 NO 48 Vio/Brn A CDI 12 Cust Retn 3019 Slt/Red A CDO7 NC B CDO15 NC 49 Slt/Vio Cust Retn 13 B CDI 3120 Red/Slt A CDO7 Com B CDO15 Com 50 Vio/Slt A CDI 13 Cust Retn 3121 Blu/Blk A CDO7 NO B CDO15 NO 51 Red/Wht Cust Retn 14 B CDI 3222 Blk/Blu A CDO8 NC B CDO16 NC 52 Wht/Red A CDI 14 Cust Retn 3223 Org/Blk A CDO8 Com B CDO16 Com 53 Blk/Wht Cust Retn 15 B CDI 3324 Blk/Org A CDO8 NO B CDO16 NO 54 Wht/Blk A CDI 15 Cust Retn 3325 Grn/Blk Cust Retn 1 B CDI 19 55 Yel/Wht Cust Retn 16 B CDI 3426 Blk/Grn A CDI 1 Cust Retn 19 56 Wht/Yel A CDI 16 Cust Retn 3427 Brn/Blk Cust Retn 2 B CDI 20 57 Vio/Wht Cust Retn 17 B CDI 3528 Blk/Brn A CDI 2 Cust Retn 20 58 Wht/Vio A CDI 17 Cust Retn 3529 Slt/Blk Cust Retn 3 B CDI 21 +27V*Pwr Conv Alm –48V59 Blk/Red Cust Retn 18 B CDI 3630 Blk/Slt A CDI 3 Cust Retn 21 +27V*Pwr Conv Retn –48V60 Red/Blk A CDI 18 Cust Retn 36NOTE*For –48V, reserved for Power Supply Module Alarm signal. NOT for use as CDOs or CDIs.All Cust Rtrn 1–18 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.All Cust Rtrn 19–36 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.CDO = Customer Defined Output; CDI = Customer Defined Input; NC – normally closed, NO – normally open, Com – commonThe “A CDI” numbering is from the LMF/OMCR/CBSC perspective. LMF/OMCR/CBSC starts the numbering at 19(giving 19 – 36). Actual cable hardware starts the numbering at 0 (giving 0–17)3](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-106.png)
![Oct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-1Chapter 4Automated Acceptance TestProcedure4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-107.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-2Automated Acceptance Test ProceduresIntroductionThe Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular FieldEngineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTSsubsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) andsupported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)assignment.The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to afile that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platformusing the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipmentsupported by the LMF can be used.This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which isthe recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages ofsimplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeyingcommmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the executionof complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feelthe command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into theprogress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, referto LMF CLI Commands.NOTE – Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the“Caveats” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.– The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)sectors only.– DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by theLMF.Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed forcalibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-108.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-3Reduced ATPNOTE Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense–governing bodies require documentation supportingSITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTSsite are NOT required.After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,and FER tests.2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-3) todetermine the applicable test that must be performed.In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test setcomponents, if required.Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performedand the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-109.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-4ATP Test OptionsThere are three different ATP testing options that can be performed tocompletely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of thefollowing ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides theprocedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATPtests according to one of the following ATP testing options:ATP Testing Option 1SAll TX/RX test – Executes all the TX and RX tests as described intesting option 2.ATP Testing Option 2SAll TX test – TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit lineup. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs andpassive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,and RF cables.SAll RX test – RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver lineup. These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (forexpansion frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passivecomponents including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.ATP Testing Option 3These tests can be run individually:STX Mask testSRho testSPilot Time Offset testSCode Domain Power testSFER testNOTE The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX pathcalibrated, BLO downloaded, and TX audited before all the TXand RX tests are run.NOTE If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,remove the manual control/system memory card from the cardslot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode beforestarting the automated testing.NOTE The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-110.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-5ATP Test PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have beencompleted:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) havecorrect code load and data load.SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest cables are calibrated.STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-19 throughFigure 3-24 starting on page 3-68).STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.SGPIB is on.SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed.WARNING Before performing the FER, be sure that all PAs are turned OFF(circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properlyterminated.All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury orequipment damage.TX OUT ConnectionNOTE Many of the acceptance test procedures require takingmeasurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At siteswithout RFDS installed, all measurements will be via the BTSTX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed, allmeasurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler TXOUT connector.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-111.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-6Required Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications system analyzerSSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communicationssystem analyzers for 1X FER)WARNING –Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed.– At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the PAs under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.NOTE The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-112.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-7Individual Acceptance TestsThe following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specificaspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.All testing is performed using the LMF GUI environment.TX TestingTX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output powercontrol. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated testequipment. All measurements are made at the appropriate BTS TX OUTconnector(s).TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA forward link usingselected BBXs assigned to respective sector antennas. Each BBX iskeyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbxlevel and BLO)at the CDF file–specified carrier output power level.RX TestingRX testing verifies receive antenna paths for BBXs selected for the test.All tests are performed using the external, calibrated test equipment toinject a CDMA RF carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RXfrequency at the appropriate BTS RX IN connector(s).RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA reverse link using allequipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.Individual TestsThe following individual tests can be used to verify the results ofspecific tests.Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification withrespect to the assigned CDF file values.Waveform Quality (rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value inANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual andperfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, PilotGain = 262, PN Offset = 0).Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channelpower).4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-113.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-8Frame Error RateThe Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entireCDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to allrespective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on alltraffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs atan RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-114.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-9ATP Test ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedureStep Action 1 Be sure that all prerequisites described on page 4-5 have been met.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.2Select the device(s) to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select the desired test from the pulldown menu:–All TX/RX ATP... / All TX ATP... / All RX ATP... or –TX > (TX Mask... / Rho... / Pilot Time Offset... / Code Domain Power...) or–RX > FER...4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist. To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.NOTESingle–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.7For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list.8In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop–down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.9Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,all channel elements are specified.Use one of the following methods to enter more than one channel element:– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).NOTEThe channel element numbers are 0 based; that is the first channel element is 0.. . . continued on next page4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-115.png)
![Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-10Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedureStep Action10 If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This requiresan MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the gainfor the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.11 Click on the OK button. The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.12 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting. The test results are displayed in the status report window.13 Click on Save Results or Dismiss. If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the testreport file. 4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-116.png)
![Individual ATP Test Background Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-11Individual ATP Test Background InformationTX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test (Tx Mask)This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDSdirectional coupler).NOTE TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power levelto +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gainset to 541.The calibrated communications test set measures and returns theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolutionbandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channelmeasured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meetsystem tolerances at the following test points:S1.7/1.9 GHz:– at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency– at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequencyS800 MHz:– at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency– at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequencyThe BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-117.png)
![Individual ATP Test Background Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-12Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display– 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter FrequencyReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHz– 1980 kHzFW00282TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that theresult meets system tolerances:SWaveform quality (rho) should be w0.912 (–0.4dB).The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-118.png)
![Individual ATP Test Background Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-13TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements fromthe MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using bothbbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the PilotTime Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:SPilot Time Offset should be within v3 ms of the target PTOffset (0ms).The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance TestThis test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrierkeyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled bythe same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCCchannel elements under test are configured to generate OrthogonalChannel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to beassigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs tobe tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channelelements are verified on all sectors.BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUTconnector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).Verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODDnumbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done byverifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to10.2 $ 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channelsmeasures v –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).NOTE When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is an MCC8Eor MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or show marginalperformance. This is due to a timing mismatch that the LMF does notaddress. Performing this test from the CBSC will not have this timingproblem.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-119.png)
![Individual ATP Test Background Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-14The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, theOCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor LevelsPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< –27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64FAILURE – DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE – EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE – EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC. Showing all OCNS Passing Indicating Failures FW00283RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance TestThis test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currentlyconfigured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF inputlevel of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower TopAmplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibratedtest set as the signal source controlled by the same command. Allmeasurements are via the LMF.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channelelements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-120.png)
![Individual ATP Test Background Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 4-15up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (withpilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDSdirectional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receivecircuitry.The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcodeand provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverselink for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying thatresults meet the following specification:SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. TheBBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assignthe applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths undertest. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-121.png)
![Generating an ATP Report 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP4-16Generating an ATP ReportBackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include theresults of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used toclose the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if thestatus reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.ATP ReportEach time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTSand includes the following for each test:STest nameSBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)STime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATPreport for a BTS.Table 4-2: Generating an ATP ReportnStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Stationpick list.3Click on the Report button.4Click on a column heading to sort the report.5– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on theDismiss button.– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desiredfile type in the picklist and click on the Save button.4](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-122.png)
![Oct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-1Chapter 5Prepare to Leave the Site5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-123.png)
![Updating Calibration Data Files 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-2Updating Calibration Data FilesSoftware Release caveatsWith Software Release 2.16.1.x, the packet BTS will NOT detect a newcalibration file on the OMC–R. A manual workaround is available inbulletin cdma_g_bts_059. This will be corrected in Software Release2.16.3.Software Release 2.16.3 will allow the user to load the calibration filefrom the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then ftp the newcalibration file to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the userto place the calibration file at the OMC–R.Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSCAfter completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL fileinformation must be moved from the LMF Windows environment backto the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detailmoving files from one environment to the other.Copying CAL files from LMF to a DisketteFollow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from an LMFcomputer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a DisketteStep Action1 With Windows running on the LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:\.2Launch the Windows Explorer application program from the Start > Programs menu list.3Select the applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory/cdma/bts–# folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders. 5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-124.png)
![Updating Calibration Data Files68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-3Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedure in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-2: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log into the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.2Place the diskette containing calibration files (cal files) in the workstation diskette drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.4 Type mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.NOTEIf the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify the bts–#.cal file filename appears in the displayeddirectory listing.7Type in cd and press the Enter key.8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify the displayed response shows the correct home directory(/home/<user’s name>).9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in the homedirectory by performing the following:9a – Type in dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key.Where: # = BTS number for which the CAL file was createdNOTEOther versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp (copy)command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited out with aUnix text editor.10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the CAL files have been copied. Verify all CALfiles to be transferred appear in the displayed listing.11 Type eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-125.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-4Prepare to Leave the SiteExternal Test Equipment RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-3: External Test Equipment RemovalStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RXconnectors on the top of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feedlines at the top of the frame.CAUTION Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to thecorrect ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will causesystem degradation of call processing.NOTE Each module or device can be in any state prior to downloading.Each module or device will be in an OOS_RAM state afterdownloading has completed.– For all LMF commands, information in italics representsvalid ranges for that command field.– Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.Default values for other fields will be assumed.– For more complete command examples (including systemresponse details), refer to the CDMA LMF User Guide.5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-126.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-5BTS Site Span Configuration VerificationTable 5-4 describes how to verify the current Span Framing Format andLine Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards in allC–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be verified.Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of theMGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).2Start an MMI communication session with MGLI2 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-3 on page 3-13).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line codeconfiguration (in bold type):span view <cr>Observe a display similar to the options shown below:COMMAND ACCEPTED: span viewThe parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 NOTE– Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.– Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.– There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.– If the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display thecorrect choice, proceed to Table 5-5.4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu. 5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-127.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-6Figure 5-1: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port ConnectionFW003449–PIN TO 9– PINRS–232 CABLENULL MODEM BOARD(PART# 8484877P01)RS–232 CABLE FROM LMF COM1PORTMMI SERIAL PORTGLI BOARDSet BTS Site Span ConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must beconfigured.NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurationsloaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match those in theOMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to thefront panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).2Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-3 on page 3-13).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.. . . continued on next page5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-128.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-7Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parametersto match that of the physical spans a – f run to the site:span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>option#1 = the span to change (a – f)option#2 = the span type (0 – 8):0 – E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC–4)1 – E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)2 – E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC–4, TS16)3 – E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)4 – T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)5 – T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)6 – J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)7 – J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)8 – T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbpsoption#4 = the span equalization (0 – 7):0 – T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)1 – T1_4 (T1,J1:393–524 feet)2 – T1_4 (T1,J1:131–262 feet)3 – E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)4 – T1_4 (T1,J1:0–131 feet)5 – T1_4 (T1,J1:524–655 feet)6 – T1_4 (T1,J1:262–393 feet)7 – E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 – 31)Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120–Ohm, LAPD channel 1:span_config a 1 64 7 1..span_config f 1 64 7 1Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0–131 feet), LAPD channel 0:span_config a 5 64 4 0..span_config f 5 64 4 0NOTEMake sure that spans a – f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may bedifferent for each individual span.After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/GLI2 board MUST be reset andre–loaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used atthe site.4Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.. . . continued on next page5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-129.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-8Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next GLI2and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards.6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI. LMF RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMFGUI session and remove the LMF computer.Table 5-6: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMFStep Action! CAUTIONDO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing the procedure indicated below.Corrupted/lost data files may result, and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.1Log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on File in the LMF window menu bar and selectingLogout and Exit from the pull–down list.2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windowsmessage appears.3Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.4Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.5Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as requiredfor equipment transport.5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-130.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-9Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans and Integrated Frame ModemBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors thatwere removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7and Figure 5-2 as required.Table 5-7: T1/E1 Span/IFM ConnectionsStep Action1Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.2If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pinsub D connector.NOTEVerify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated FrameModem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.Figure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections50–PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS–232 9–PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW002995](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-131.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-10Reset All Devices and Initialize Site RemotelyDevices in the BTS should not be left with data and code loaded fromthe LMF. The configuration data and code loads used for normaloperation could be different from those stored in the LMF files. Performthe procedure in Table 5-8 to reset all devices and initialize site remotely.Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action1Terminate the LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.2Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.3– If BTS is configured for circuit operation, go to Step 4.– If BTS is configured for packet operation, go to Step 5.4Circuit BTS Procedure:4a From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS reset.orAt the BTS site:– unseat one GLI card at a time and wait for 30 seconds;– reseat the GLI and wait for it to complete its initialization (this takes about one minute);– repeat for the second GLI.4b Depending on the number of installed operational GLI cards, perform one of the following:– With fully redundant GLIs, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to run the ACTIVATEcommand for the BTS.– For a non–redundant GLI or a frame where the redundant GLI is not operational, contact theOMC–R and request the operator:SACTIVATE the GLI to set the Nextload attribute for the GLI to the one for the current BSSsoftware version;SDisable the GLI;SEnable the GLI to allow the MM to load the software version specified by the Nextloadattribute;SOnce the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R and request the operator ACTIVATE the BTS.– Once the GLI cards are loaded with the specified code version, the active GLI will verify andupdate, as required, the RAM and, if it is necessary, ROM code loads for the installed CSM,MCC, and BBX cards using the DLM.. . . continued on next page5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-132.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 5-11Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action5Packet BTS procedure:5a From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS to therequired software version for the BSS. There are two types of PREACTIVATE load processes:–Rolling Upgrade: This load process is only available when the BTS cards are populated for fullredundancy as applicable.–Quick Reboot: This process is used when there is not full redundancy for the BTS cards. TheGLI3 will disable and reboot to the new load. This will cause all the other cards to go out ofservice. Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new load and thendownloads the cards in the order which they establish communication with the GLI3 followingtheir reboot. The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.6After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R and confirm that the BTS isunder OMC–R control. 5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-133.png)
![Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP5-12Notes5](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-134.png)
![Oct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-1Chapter 6Basic Troubleshooting6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-135.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting Overview 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-2Basic Troubleshooting OverviewOverviewThe information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basictroubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not performper the procedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained form experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-136.png)
![Troubleshooting: Installation68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-3Troubleshooting: InstallationCannot Log into Cell-SiteFollow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If the MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset the MGLI by re-seating it. Ifthis persists, install a known good MGLI card in the MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may alsoindicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-4 on page 3-16).If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-11 on page 3-34).4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (seeTable 3-5 on page 3-17).5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-9 on page 3-33).8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primaryport.9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for thisconnection.10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI and retry.12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.Cannot Communicate to Power MeterFollow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power metercommunication failure.Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicableGPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-25 orTable 3-26 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test EquipmentPreparation section of Appendix F for details.. . . continued on next page6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-137.png)
![Troubleshooting: Installation 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-4Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenActionStep5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB box power andretry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists. Cannot Communicate to Communications AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communicationsanalyzer communication failure.Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify signal generator is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable connections as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIBaddress box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-25 or Table 3-26and the GPIB Address section of Appendix F for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test EquipmentPreparation section of Appendix F for details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box powerand retry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-138.png)
![Troubleshooting: Download68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-5Troubleshooting: DownloadCannot Download CODE to Any Device (card)Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code downloadfailure.Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.3Communication to the MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTSdevice.The MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.Reset the card by re-seating it.If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat the card and try again.7If a BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Use the LMFStatus function to verify the load.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting thedevice and Reset.9If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMFDevice > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.10 If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flashmemory.Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data downloadfailure.Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-139.png)
![Troubleshooting: Download 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-6Cannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The colorof the device changes to green once it is enabled.The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enablefailure.Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cellsite location and GPS sync.3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable. Miscellaneous ErrorsPerform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneousfailures.Table 6-7: Miscellaneous FailuresnStep Action1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect anMMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-3 on page 3-13).2 Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.(Call Field Support for further assistance.)6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-140.png)
![Troubleshooting: Calibration68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-7Troubleshooting: CalibrationBay Level Offset Calibration FailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibrationfailure.Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)and connection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:For 1900 MHz:Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16For 800 MHz:Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8For 1700 MHz:Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=163Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry.6Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Refsignal.7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show“RES”. 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-141.png)
![Troubleshooting: Calibration 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-8Cannot Load BLOFor Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.Calibration Audit FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration auditfailure.Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section ofChapter 3).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) PowerRef signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.Re-try the audit.6Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry. 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-142.png)
![Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-9Troubleshooting: Transmit ATPBTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normaloperationFollow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Linkproblem during normal operation.Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)nStep Action1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:– TX mask– TX rho– TX code domainCannot Perform TX Mask MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX maskmeasurement failure.Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot timeoffset measurement failure.Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.3Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling thecircuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPSis still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift–avg>and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilizedbefore going INS and may need to be re-initialized. 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-143.png)
![Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-10Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor MeasurementPerform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain andnoise floor measurement failure.Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-144.png)
![Troubleshooting: Receive ATP68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-11Troubleshooting: Receive ATPMulti–FER Test FailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FERfailure.Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent offailure).6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-145.png)
![Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-12Troubleshooting: CSM Check–listProblem DescriptionMany of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures maybe resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory forrepair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in fieldreturns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver OperationIf having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”to the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kitSGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kitSGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectlyconfigured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt tochange hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPSantenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.Checksum FailureThe CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSMboard back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSMsoftware (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by anearlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded fromthe CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reloadfails.CSM Reference Source Configuration ErrorThis problem is caused by incorrect reference source configurationperformed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 andSGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shownbelow) to function correctly.CSM KitNo.HardwareConfigurationCSM SlotNo.Reference SourceConfigurationCDF ValueSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO02 or 18SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO12 or 186](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-146.png)
![Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-13Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INSThis problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check theaccuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM systemtime/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least onesatellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and foursatellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-147.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-14C–CCP Backplane TroubleshootingIntroductionThe C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all theC–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. Thisinformation allows the CFE to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf BusConnectorsThe 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface busfrom the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basicfunction is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to allother GLIs in the frame.The ISB also provides the following functions:SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.SMMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.SInterface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).Span Line ConnectorThe 50–pin span line connector provides a primary and secondary (ifused) span line interface to each GLI in the C–CCP shelf. The span lineis used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master GLI and also all theBBX traffic.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference DistributionModule Input/OutputThe Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHzreference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in thebackplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits onthe GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signalfrequencies.Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)Provides a +27 volt or –48 volt input for use by the power supplymodules.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-148.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-15Power Supply Module InterfaceEach power supply module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. Theseinclude a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pininterface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCPPower Modules convert +27 or –48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and+5.0 Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. In the –48 V BTS, theLPA power modules convert –48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.GLI ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C–CCP backplane.GLI 10Base–2 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routedto the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications between the master GLI and the other GLI, betweengateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.BBX ConnectorEach BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.CIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) tothe other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via theC–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent tothe appropriate BBX.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to thebackplane, then on to the MCC slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each outputis routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane tothe CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling tothe LPAs in the LPA shelf.C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting ProcedureTable 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. Thetables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.NOTE Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed beforereplacing ANY C–CCP backplane.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-149.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-16Digital Control ProblemsNo GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control viaLMF failure.Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)nStep Action1Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.2Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI. No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLIcontrol failures.Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)Step Action1Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection anddamage.6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLIStep Action1Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.3Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-150.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-17No AMR Control (MGLI good)Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR controlfailure when the MGLI control is good.Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good – No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control overCo–located GLIs)Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control inthe shelf failure.Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLIsStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficPerform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line trafficfailure.Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-151.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-18No (or Missing) MCC Channel ElementsPerform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elementsfailure.Table 6-21: No MCC Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify MCC channel elements (CEs) are correct. MCCTYPE codes are: MCC8E=0, MCC24E=2,MCC–1X=3.2If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.3If no CEs on any MCC:– Verify clock reference to CIO.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-152.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-19DC Power ProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto power supply module failure.WARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to theBTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a secondperson present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleTable 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.2Verify there are no breakers tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker andattempt to reset it.– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.3Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane bymeasuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” powerfeed clip on the distribution backplane.– If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.5If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.6Replace the power supply module with a known good module.7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) hasoccurred.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-153.png)
![C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-20No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI,BBX, or SwitchboardPerform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signalrouting problems.Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected boardslots.2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-154.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-21Module Front Panel LED Indicators and ConnectorsModule Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED Status CombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls thestate of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and LPApower converters.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-155.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-22CSM LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT inDUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor PortsPWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303 . . . continued on next page6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-156.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-23FREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. TheRS–232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily inthe development or factory environment, but may be used in thefield for debug/maintenance purposes.GLI2 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Figure 6-2.The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:ACTIVESolid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should beactive.MASTERSSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARMSSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff – No Alarm.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-157.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-24STATUSSFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANSSSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.GLI2 Pushbuttons and ConnectorsRESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbuttoncauses a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intendedto be used primarily in the development or factory environmentbut may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuitboard mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom frontedge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernetcabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNCconnectors.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-158.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-25Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front PanelMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE LEDSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESTATUS LEDRESETPUSHBUTTONALARM LEDSPANS LEDMASTER LEDSTATUS OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turnsOFF.SLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)RESETALARMOFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turnsOFF.SLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)SPANSMASTERMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSAll functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing andreleasing the switch.ON – operating normally in active modeOFF – operating normally in standby modeShows the operating status of the redundant cards. Theredundant card toggles automatically if the active card isremoved or failsON – active card operating normallyOFF – standby card operating normallyThe pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. Thecard in the top shelf is designated by hardware as theactive card; the card in the bottom shelf is in the standbymode.OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN – operating normallyYELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans isreceiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in analarm stateAn RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link foruse as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to amaximum of 115,200 baud communications.FW002256](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-159.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-26GLI3 Front PanelFigure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel.Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front PanelSTATUS OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turnsOFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)RESETALARMOFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turnsOFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)BPR ASpanMMIACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSPressing and releasing the switch resets all functions onthe GLI3.Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. Theredundant card toggles automatically if the active card isremoved or failsON – active card operating normallyOFF – standby card operating normallyConnects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired asan ethernet client.An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link foruse as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to amaximum of 115,200 baud communications.BPR BGLIAUXSupports the cross–coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLIusing a double crossover cable.Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personalcomputer with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connectionof ethernet “sniffer” when the ethernet switch is properlyconfigured for port monitoring.Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired asan ethernet client.MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE–Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE–TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE–T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwOFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN – operating normallyYELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans isreceiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in analarm state6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-160.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-27BBX LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarmSShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarmMCC LED Status CombinationsThe MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show theconnectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED – fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-161.png)
![Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-28Figure 6-4: MCC Front PanelPWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEPWR/ALMOFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up and duringfailure conditionsACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSRAPIDLY BLINKING – Card iscode-loaded but not enabledSLOW BLINKING – Card is notcode-loadedON – card is code-loaded and enabled(INS_ACTIVE)COLORGREENREDREDON – fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating with green)– CHI bus inactive on power-upAn alarm is generated in the event of a failureFW00224LPA Shelf LED Status CombinationsLPA Module LEDEach LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMIconnector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED asfollows:SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting anlow input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal anddoes not constitute a failure.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-162.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-29Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control LinkSpan Problems (No Control Link)Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control linkfailure.Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown inFigure 6-5 or Figure 6-6.2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windowsdesktop shortcut icon.3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI>prompt is obtained.4At the GLI> prompt, enter:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu.9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole C–CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISBcabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-163.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-30Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonGLIti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-164.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-31Figure 6-6: GLI3 Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2GLI3MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE–Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE–TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE–T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwREF6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-165.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-32Set BTS Site Span ConfigurationTable 6-26 describes how to set the span parameter configuration.NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurationsloaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match those in theOMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnStep Action1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicableMGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-5.2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate oneby using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.3At the GLI> prompt, enter:config ni format <option> <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST – Option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.4To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), asshown in the following example:> T1_2 <cr> NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>5An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>. . . continued on next page6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-166.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-33Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep6If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni linkspeed <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:Next available options: LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.7To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),as shown in the following example:>64K <cr>NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>8An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>9If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni equal<cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equalNext available options: LIST – span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>. . . continued on next page6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-167.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-34Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown inthe following example:>a<cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal Next available options: LIST – equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132–262 feet 2 : 263–393 feet 3 : 394–524 feet 4 : 525–655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)>11 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example:>0<cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>12 Repeat Steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.NOTE– After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equalcommands, the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to takeeffect.– Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type andlinkspeed used at the site.13 Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.14 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are asrequired:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – 0–131 feet Span B – 0–131 feet Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64KThe actual rate is 0. . . continued on next page6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-168.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP 6-35Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep15 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it andrepeat Steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.16 Return to Step 6 of Table 6-25. 6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-169.png)
![Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP6-36Notes6](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-170.png)
![Oct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-1Appendix AData SheetsA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-171.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-2Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data SheetsVerification of Test Equipment UsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-172.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-3Site ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Deliveries Per established procedures−Floor Plan Verified−−−Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure−−−Factory Data:BBXTest PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure−Site Temperature−Dress Covers/BracketsPreliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments−Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage−BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure−Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-173.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-4Pre–Power and Initial Power TestsTable A-4: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Pre–power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications−−−−−−−−Internal Cables:ISB (all cages)CSM (all cages)Power (all cages)Ethernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalled−Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed−Initial power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications:Comments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-174.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-5General Optimization ChecklistTable A-5: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−−LEDsFrame fansilluminatedoperational−−−−−−LMF to BTS ConnectionPreparing the LMFLog into the LMF PCCreate site specific BTS directoryCreate master–bts–cdma directoryDownload device loadsMoving/Linking filesper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure−−Ping LAN APing LAN Bper procedureper procedure−−−−−−−−−−Download/Enable MGLIsDownload/Enable GLIsSet Site Span ConfigurationDownload CSMsDownloadEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCCsDownload BBXsDownload TSU (in RFDS)Program TSU NAMper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure−Test Set Calibration per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-175.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-6GPS Receiver OperationTable A-6: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments−GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter−Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed−Current Position:latlonheightRECORD in msand cm alsoconvert to degmin sec−Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:−GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter−Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-176.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-7LFR Receiver OperationTable A-7: LFR Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments−Station call letters M X Y Zassignment.as specified in sitedocumentation−SN ratio is > 8 dB−LFR Task State: lfrlocked to station xxxxVerify parameter−Current reference source:Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-177.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-8LPA IM ReductionTable A-8: LPA IM ReductionParameter CommentsOKLPACARRIERSpecificationOKLPA#4:1 & 2:13–Sector2:16–SectorDual BP3–SectorDual BP6–SectorSpecification−1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms−1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms−1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms−1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms−2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms−2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms−2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms−2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms−3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms−3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms−3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms−3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms−4A C4 C2 No Alarms−4B C4 C2 No Alarms−4C C4 C2 No Alarms−4D C4 C2 No AlarmsA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-178.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-9LPA ConvergenceTable A-9: LPA ConvergenceOK Parameter Specification DataLPA # Converged−1A Verify per procedure & uploadconvergence data−1B convergence data−1C−1D−2A Verify per procedure & uploadconvergence data−2B convergence data−2C−2D−3A Verify per procedure & uploadconvergence data−3B convergence data−3C−3D−4A Verify per procedure & uploadconvergence data−4B convergence data−4C−4DA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-179.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-10TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels4–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 1–C, and 2– and 4–C Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–4, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 3TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–5, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 4TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–11, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-180.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-11Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 1–C, and 2– and 4–C Non–adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–4, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–5, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 3BBX–6, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–11, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 4BBX–12, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________2–Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 2–C Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-181.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-12Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 2–C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________3–Carrier Adjacent Channels4–Carrier Adjacent ChannelsTable A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-182.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-13Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 3TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–3, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 4TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-183.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-14Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 3BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 4BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-184.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-15TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6–Sector Configurations1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–S: 1–C, 2–C Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−carrier 1y ( yp ),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−carrier 2y ( yp ),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–3, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB. . . continued on next pageA](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-185.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-16Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–S: 1–C, 2–C Non–adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−CalibrationAudit0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−Auditcarrier 1()gpost calibration BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−CalibrationAudit0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−Auditcarrier 2()gpost calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-186.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-17BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsTable A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsOK Parameter Specification Data−SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure−MGLI redundancy test Verify per procedure−GLI redundancy test Verify per procedure−Power supply/converterredundancyVerify per procedure−Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure−CSM, GPS, & LFRredundancy/alarm testsVerify per procedure−LPA redundancy test Verify per procedureComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________TX Antenna VSWRTable A-15: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-187.png)
![Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-18RX Antenna VSWRTable A-16: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:_________________________________________________________AMR VerificationTable A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data−Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM A”(numbers 1 –18)BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/Clears−Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM B” (numbers 19 –36)BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-188.png)
![Site Serial Number Check List68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP A-19Site Serial Number Check ListC–CCP ShelfSite I/O A & BC–CCP ShelfCSM–1CSM–2HSOCCD–1CCD–2AMR–1AMR–2MPC–1MPC–2Fans 1–3 GLI–1GLI–2BBX–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–7BBX–8BBX–9BBX–10BBX–11BBX–12BBX–rMCC–1MCC–2MCC–3MCC–4MCC–5MCC–6MCC–7MCC–8MCC–9A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-189.png)
![Site Serial Number Check List 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPA-20MCC–10MCC–11MCC–12CIOSWITCHPS–1PS–2PS–3LPAsLPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 2ALPA 2BLPA 2CLPA 2DLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3CLPA 3DLPA 4ALPA 4BLPA 4CLPA 4DPower Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only)AMRPS 4PS 5PS 6PS 7PS 8PS 9A](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-190.png)
![Oct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP B-1Appendix BPN Offset/I & Q Offset RegisterProgramming InformationB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-191.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPB-2PN Offset Programming InformationPN Offset BackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the correspondingI & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table B-1.PN Offset UsageOnly the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determinethe RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can bedone by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdjvalue is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97specifications.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.NOTE CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL orHEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal before comparingthem to cdf file I & Q value assignments.B](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-192.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP B-3Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA31 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D2 4700 17398 125C 43F63 14406 26333 3846 66DD4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB5 17025 2256 4281 08D06 14745 18651 3999 48DB7 2783 1094 0ADF 04468 5832 21202 16C8 52D29 12407 13841 3077 361110 31295 31767 7A3F 7C1711 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA12 18523 30999 485B 791713 29920 22420 74E0 579414 25184 20168 6260 4EC815 26282 12354 66AA 304216 30623 11187 779F 2BB317 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A18 23026 10395 59F2 289B19 20019 28035 4E33 6D8320 4050 27399 0FD2 6B0721 1557 22087 0615 564722 30262 2077 7636 081D23 18000 13758 4650 35BE24 20056 11778 4E58 2E0225 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD726 17437 7184 441D 1C1027 17438 2362 441E 093A28 5102 25840 13EE 64F029 9302 12177 2456 2F9130 17154 10402 4302 28A231 5198 1917 144E 077D32 4606 17708 11FE 452C33 24804 10630 60E4 298634 17180 6812 431C 1A9C35 10507 14350 290B 380E36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF737 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA40 10030 2010 272E 07DA41 16984 25936 4258 655042 14225 28531 3791 6F7343 26519 11952 6797 2EB044 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB45 30100 25589 7594 63F546 7922 11345 1EF2 2C5147 14199 28198 3777 6E2648 17637 13947 44E5 367B49 23081 8462 5A29 210E50 5099 9595 13EB 257B. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-193.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPB-4Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E52 7114 14672 1BCA 395053 7699 29415 1E13 72E754 19339 20610 4B8B 508255 28212 6479 6E34 194F56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA58 14901 22726 3A35 58C659 20160 5247 4EC0 147F60 22249 29953 56E9 750161 26582 5796 67D6 16A462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD63 15127 4528 3B17 11B064 15274 5415 3BAA 152765 23149 10294 5A6D 283666 16340 17046 3FD4 429667 27052 7846 69AC 1EA668 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A69 10620 13814 297C 35F670 15978 16854 3E6A 41D671 27966 795 6D3E 031B72 12479 9774 30BF 262E73 1536 24291 0600 5EE374 3199 3172 0C7F 0C6475 4549 2229 11C5 08B576 17888 21283 45E0 532377 13117 16905 333D 420978 7506 7062 1D52 1B9679 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C80 31109 25575 7985 63E781 29755 14244 743B 37A482 26711 28053 6857 6D9583 20397 30408 4FAD 76C884 18608 5094 48B0 13E685 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF787 23466 174 5BAA 00AE88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA89 25798 2320 64C6 091090 28134 23113 6DE6 5A4991 28024 23985 6D78 5DB192 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C93 21508 1826 5404 072294 26338 30853 66E2 788595 17186 15699 4322 3D5396 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D97 3908 25000 0F44 61A898 25390 18163 632E 46F399 27891 12555 6CF3 310B100 9620 8670 2594 21DE. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-194.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP B-5Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A102 16876 4407 41EC 1137103 17034 1163 428A 048B104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55106 8382 8978 20BE 2312107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74112 8521 25094 2149 6206113 30232 23380 7618 5B54114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE115 27116 22821 69EC 5925116 4238 31634 108E 7B92117 5128 4403 1408 1133118 14846 689 39FE 02B1119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3122 13811 22338 35F3 5742123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E124 1213 22096 04BD 5650125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE131 594 13555 0252 34F3132 25804 8789 64CC 2255133 31013 24821 7925 60F5134 32585 21068 7F49 524C135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93136 17231 5321 434F 14C9137 31554 551 7B42 0227138 8764 12115 223C 2F53139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326140 13428 1991 3474 07C7141 17658 14404 44FA 3844142 13475 17982 34A3 463E143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36147 1377 29094 0561 71A6148 28654 653 6FEE 028D149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3150 16770 23588 4182 5C24. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-195.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPB-6Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E152 25685 31060 6455 7954153 21356 30875 536C 789B154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1156 22898 9586 5972 2572157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8158 30010 30389 753A 76B5159 2365 7298 093D 1C82160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6161 29740 23137 742C 5A61162 5665 24597 1621 6015163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05164 1680 7764 0690 1E54165 25861 14518 6505 38B6166 25712 21634 6470 5482167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A168 26887 26454 6907 6756169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F172 31555 758 7B43 02F6173 29171 16528 71F3 4090174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0176 30270 17698 763E 4522177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78181 15873 26696 3E01 6848182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6185 22977 9737 59C1 2609186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6187 10637 30643 298D 77B3188 25454 13230 636E 33AE189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9190 6368 2055 18E0 0807191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD194 889 6074 0379 17BA195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D196 20520 15880 5028 3E08197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA199 21639 816 5487 0330200 31120 22309 7990 5725. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-196.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP B-7Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316203 17429 10460 4415 28DC204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6205 17808 20277 4590 4F35206 30068 19988 7574 4E14207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5209 20371 6024 4F93 1788210 13829 20520 3605 5028211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF212 25732 26063 6484 65CF213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43214 5187 6614 1443 19D6215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA216 28242 5511 6E52 1587217 6243 17119 1863 42DF218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E220 13256 4660 33C8 1234221 18472 13881 4828 3639222 25945 16819 6559 41B3223 31051 6371 794B 18E3224 1093 24673 0445 6061225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719227 29833 5957 7489 1745228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D229 24813 22155 60ED 568B230 47 15050 002F 3ACA231 3202 16450 0C82 4042232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0234 25297 17153 62D1 4301235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9236 28519 30581 6F67 7775237 4991 3600 137F 0E10238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001239 17728 671 4540 029F240 14415 20774 384F 5126241 30976 24471 7900 5F97242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521246 8307 26143 2073 661F247 12918 13359 3276 342F248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A249 24873 13747 6129 35B3250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-197.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPB-8Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF254 16820 4951 41B4 1357255 22479 749 57CF 02ED256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1258 19332 2358 4B84 0936259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE260 14698 31198 396A 79DE261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB262 30475 8862 770B 229E263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7264 1912 7443 0778 1D13265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E266 15705 25093 3D59 6205267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F269 16779 32545 418B 7F21270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77272 8322 10378 2082 288A273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9274 26934 5125 6936 1405275 18806 12528 4976 30F0276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF277 9245 20959 241D 51DF278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0279 18684 26453 48FC 6755280 8220 29421 201C 72ED281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4285 12417 26028 3081 65AC286 30901 29852 78B5 749C287 9366 14978 2496 3A82288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96289 21458 25143 53D2 6237290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE291 8999 5336 2327 14D8292 26718 21885 685E 557D293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051294 27961 30097 6D39 7591295 28465 21877 6F31 5575296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-198.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information68P09258A31–AOct 2003 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP B-9Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B303 52 5371 0034 14FB304 27254 10242 6A76 2802305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A307 377 19550 0179 4C5E308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1310 26629 10898 6805 2A92311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0316 25560 4381 63D8 111D317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB320 26334 9037 66DE 234D321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F324 4244 16872 1094 41E8325 8499 9072 2133 2370326 9362 12966 2492 32A6327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6328 30957 25118 78ED 621E329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49331 1153 20983 0481 51F7332 29304 12372 7278 3054333 6041 13948 1799 367C334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8336 10096 17354 2770 43CA337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743342 25501 10346 639D 286A343 4489 13200 1189 3390344 31011 30402 7923 76C2345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A347 11846 21398 2E46 5396348 30331 31104 767B 7980349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-199.png)
![PN Offset Programming Information 68P09258A31–AOct 20031X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATPB-10Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA352 13173 25731 3375 6483353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C355 12083 31098 2F33 797A356 22822 16408 5926 4018357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F359 10205 14732 27DD 398C360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8361 22098 1476 5652 05C4362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD363 4408 21118 1138 527E364 102 22198 0066 56B6365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B367 26967 25802 6957 64CA368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38370 655 24248 028F 5EB8371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452374 8535 1806 2157 070E375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68377 21538 25755 5422 649B378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB380 14717 29096 397D 71A8381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95383 5008 25525 1390 63B5384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1385 22175 28855 569F 70B7386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC387 22546 20373 5812 4F95388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD389 133 26155 0085 662B390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6392 1397 21479 0575 53E7393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C396 5904 20626 1710 5092397 24341 423 5F15 01A7398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1400 1862 10818 0746 2A42. . . continued on next pageB](https://usermanual.wiki/Nokia-Solutions-and-Networks/T5EL1.Users-Manual-B/User-Guide-455782-Page-200.png)